Fujitsu AUXB18GALH Installation Manual

Fujitsu AUXB18GALH Installation Manual
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ )ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﺑﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﻋﺭﺑﻲ‬
‫‪TM‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﻭﻅﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩﻳﻥ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪AUXB04GBLH‬‬
‫‪AUXB07GALH‬‬
‫‪AUXB09GALH‬‬
‫‪AUXB12GALH‬‬
‫‪AUXB14GALH‬‬
‫‪AUXB18GALH‬‬
‫‪AUXB24GALH‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻠﺻﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻧﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻠﺳﻝ ﻭﻋﺎﻡ ﻭﺷﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻُﻧﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻣﻬﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﻌﺑﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﻑ ‪9371022611‬‬
‫‪2017/12/21 17:03:22‬‬
‫‪9371022611_IM_Ar.indd A‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﻑ ‪9371022611‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪] VRF‬ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁﻲ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻛﻝ ﻋﻠﻳﺑﺔ([‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫﻫﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺿﺭﺭ ﺷﺧﺻﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺗﻠﻛﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﺭﺃ ﺑﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺗﻛﻳﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺗﻛﻳﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺟﺯء ﻣﻥ ﺗﻛﻳﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺑﻧﻔﺳﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪.1‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪1 ...............................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪.2‬‬
‫ﻧﺑﺫﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ‪1 ............................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .1.2‬ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ‪1 ........................................................................... R410A‬‬
‫‪ .2.2‬ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻝ ‪1 ............................................................................................ R410A‬‬
‫‪ .3.2‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪1 ................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .4.2‬ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪2 .....................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪.3‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‪2 .................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .1.3‬ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‪2 ...................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .2.3‬ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ‪2 ...........................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .3.3‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء‪3 ...............................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .4.3‬ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪3 ...........................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪.4‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ‪3 ...............................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .1.4‬ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ‪3 ...................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .2.4‬ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ‪4 ......................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .3.4‬ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺗﻔﻠﻳﺞ )ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ( ‪4 ........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .4.4‬ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ‪4 ...............................................................................................‬‬
‫‪.5‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ ‪4 ......................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪.6‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪5 ............................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .1.6‬ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪5 ......................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .2.6‬ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ‪6 ................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .3.6‬ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪6 ..................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .4.6‬ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ‪7 ........................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .5.6‬ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪7 .......................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .6.6‬ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ )ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‪8 ............................................................‬‬
‫‪.7‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ ‪9 ...................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .1.7‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ ‪9 ...........................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .2.7‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺭﻣﺯ ﻣﺧﺻﺹ ‪10 .................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .3.7‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪10 .........................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪.8‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻳﺑﺔ‪11 ...........................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .1.8‬ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ ‪11 ....................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .2.8‬ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻳﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‪11 ..............................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .3.8‬ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ ‪12 .................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪.9‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻱ‪12 ...........................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .1.9‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ )ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ( ‪12 .....................................................‬‬
‫‪ .2.9‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪12 .....................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .10‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺣﺹ‪12 .................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .11‬ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ‪12 ..................................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻓﻧﻲ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻟﺩﻳﻪ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﻫﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺳﻭﺍﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺍﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﻧﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻣﻭﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻭﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻣﻭﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻭﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺻ ﱢﻧﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﻛﻝ ﺟﺯ ًء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﺄﻟﻑ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻛﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﺣﺩﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺻ ﱢﻧﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺧﻁ ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ ﻣﺣﻣﻲ ﺑﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺑﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﻼﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺗﺑﻠﻎ ‪ 3‬ﻣﻡ ﻟﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺑﺎﻷﺭﺽ )ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺭﻳﺽ( ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺯﻭﻳﺩ ﺧﻁ ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﻓﺭﻗﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻟﻼﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺟﻭﺍء ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﻣﻁﻠ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﺍﻧﺗﻅﺭ ‪ 5‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺻﻳﺎﻧﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻭﻅﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺷﺄﻥ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺷﺭ ﻣﻭﻅﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩﻳﻥ ﺑﺷﺄﻥ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻧﺑﺫﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‬
‫‪ .1.2‬ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ‪R410A‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺩﺧﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻭﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﺻﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌًﺎ ﺑﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﺳﺑﺏ ﻛﺳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻭﺍﺩﺙ ﻣﺛﻝ ﻧﻘﺹ ﺍﻷﻛﺳﺟﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻣﺱ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺻﻼﺕ ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻠﺳﻌﺎﺕ ﺻﻘﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﻟﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﻼء ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ ﻭﺗﻬﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﻟﻠﻬﺏ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﻧﺗﺞ ﻏﺎﺯ ﺳﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2.2‬ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻝ ‪R410A‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ‪ ، R410A‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻭﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﺧﺻﻳﺻًﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ‪.R410A‬‬
‫ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺿﻐﻁ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ‪ R410A‬ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ‪ 1.6‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ‪ ،R22‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻹﺧﻔﺎﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﻣﺯﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻭﺍﺩﺙ ﺧﻁﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺷﻭﺏ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﺗﺗﻌﻠﻕ ﺑﺳﻼﻣﺗﻙ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺗﻘﺩﻳﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻁﻠﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻬﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻧﺎﻭﻝ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻘﺑﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫﻫﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻓﺎﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻳﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻁﻠﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺯﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺧﺻﺹ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺑﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻭﺍﺩﺙ ﺧﻁﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺷﻭﺏ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻳﺧﺎﻟﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﺑﻁﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻭﺍﺩﺙ ﺧﻁﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺷﻭﺏ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻠﻳﻙ ﺗﻬﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﻟﻠﻬﺏ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﻧﺗﺞ ﻏﺎﺯ ﺳﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻭﻁﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺷﺧﺹ ﻣﺧﻭﻝ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺍﺭﺉ‪ ،‬ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﻣﻁﻠ ًﻘﺎ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻋﻲ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻁﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﺎﻏﻁ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﻔﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻁﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﻗﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺿﻌﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻳﻥ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻏﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻣﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺷﻌﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺍﺩ )‪ (R22‬ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺧﻠﻁ ﺳﻭﺍﺋﻝ ﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻋﻥ‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ‪ ،‬ﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻗﻁﺭ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺷﻌﺏ ﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﺭﺗﻔﻊ ‪ -0.1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 5.3‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﺳﻛﺎﻝ ﻭﻧﻁﺎﻕ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ‪ -0.1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 3.8‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﺳﻛﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‬
‫ﻟﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‪ ،‬ﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ ﻭﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺿﺧﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺿﺧﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﺩﻳﺔ )‪ (R22‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻣﺿﺧﺔ ﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺯﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺧﺔ ﻻ ﻳﺗﺩﻓﻕ ﻋﻛﺳﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺯﻳﺕ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﻣﺗﺻﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﻍ‬
‫ﺑﻘﻳﻣﺔ ‪ -100.7‬ﻛﻳﻠﻭﺑﺎﺳﻛﺎﻝ )‪ 5‬ﻁﻥ‪ -755 ،‬ﻣﻡ ﺯﺋﺑﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﻏﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻟﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ‪ R410A‬ﻣﻥ ‪.HFC‬‬
‫‪ .3.2‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻷﻏﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﻣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺻ ﱢﻧﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻭﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻭﺍﺩﺙ ﺧﻁﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺳﻘﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺷﻭﺏ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺯﻭﻳﺩ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻬﺎ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻔﻅ ﺑﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻥ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ar-1‬‬
‫‪2017/12/21 17:03:22‬‬
‫‪9371022611_IM_Ar.indd 1‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﻻﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻣﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﻫﺎﻣًﺎ ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻌﺏ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1.3‬ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‬
‫)ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺏ(‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻼﻧﻘﻼﺏ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﻘﻭﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫)‪(CD-ROM‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ )ﻛﺑﻳﺭ(‬
‫ﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ )ﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻭﺻﻐﻳﺭ(‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ )ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ(‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ‬
‫)ﺻﻐﻳﺭ(‬
‫ﻟﺭﺑﻁ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﻭﻛﺑﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ )ﺻﻐﻳﺭ(‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ‬
‫)ﻛﺑﻳﺭ(‬
‫ﻟﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ )ﻛﺑﻳﺭ(‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺭﻛﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﻣﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﺭﺗﻔﻊ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺳﺎﺣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺩﻫﻭﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﻁﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻠﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﺯﻳﺕ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺯﻳﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﺧﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻁﺎﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﺦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺩﻫﻭﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺑﻼﺳﺗﻳﻛﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻘﻭﻁ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻧﺑﻌﺙ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺗﺅﺛﺭ ﺳﻠﺑًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﻏﺎﺯ ﻛﺑﺭﻳﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻏﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻣﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﻠﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺂﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻭﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﻏﺎﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻼﺷﺗﻌﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻟﻳﺎﻑ ﻛﺭﺑﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﺑﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻼﺷﺗﻌﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻣﺗﻁﺎﻳﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺗﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﺛﻝ ﻣﺭﻗﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﻼء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﺯﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻘﺭﺍﺭﻩ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺷﻭﺏ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﺑﻭﻝ ﻓﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺣﻳﻭﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﻭﻧﻳﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻏﺭﺍﺽ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﻌﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺭﺑﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﻳﻭﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭﺍﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﺑﺎﺗﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻧﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺩﻧﻲ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺷﻳﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺯﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﺧﻁﺭ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﻏﺎﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻼﺷﺗﻌﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺭﻛﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺧﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻏﺎﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻼﺷﺗﻌﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺻﺎﻣﻭﻟﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ‪) A‬ﻓﻠﻧﺷﺔ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺻﺎﻣﻭﻟﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ‪) B‬ﻓﻠﻧﺷﺔ ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﻟﺏ )ﺟﺯء ﻋﻠﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻛﺭﺗﻭﻧﻲ(‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ ﺻﺭﻑ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻓﺗﺣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺳﻘﻑ‬
‫ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻛﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﻠﻳﻑ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ‬
‫‪) VP25‬ﻗﻁﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ‪ ،32‬ﻗﻁﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ‪(25‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻳﻝ ﻛﺎﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫)‪(1‬‬
‫)‪(2‬‬
‫)‪(3‬‬
‫)‪(4‬‬
‫)‪(5‬‬
‫)‪(6‬‬
‫)‪(7‬‬
‫)‪(8‬‬
‫)‪(9‬‬
‫ﺭﻛﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﻭﻱ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻔﻲ ﻟﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻧﺎﻓﺫ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺇﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺗﺩﻓﻕ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻧﺣﺎء ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﻛﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﻧﻪ ﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺳﺎﻭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻧﺣﺎء ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ )ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ‪ (RB‬ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺳﻬﻝ ﻣﻧﻪ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺳﻬﻝ ﻣﻧﻪ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻳﻪ ﺗﺿﺧﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺿﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺫ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻋﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﺍﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2.3‬ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻗﺗﺭﺍﺏ ﺃﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ‪ 10‬ﺳﻧﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺧﺫ ﺇﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻬﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ "ﻁﻘﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺯﻝ ﻟﻠﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻳﺔ" )ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻱ( ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻘﻑ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ‪ 80 %‬ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ‪ 30‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺧﻁﺭ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﻛﺛﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺳﻘﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﻛﺑﻝ ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﻭﻛﺑﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺩ ‪ 1‬ﻣﺗﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻘﺑﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻳﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺩﻳﻭ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻧﻊ ﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻘﺑﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻳﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻭﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺩﻳﻭ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺣﺗﻰ ﻟﻭ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪ 1‬ﻣﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﻠﻘﻰ ﺿﻭﺿﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ‪ A .Fig‬ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻐﻁﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻓﺦ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻓﺔ ﺑﺄﻛﻣﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺭﻛﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﻭﻱ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻔﻲ ﻟﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻧﻪ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﻣﻁﻠ ًﻘﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻏﺭﻓﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻣﻝ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﻏﺎﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻼﺷﺗﻌﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳُﺷﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ ﻭﻳﺳﺑﺏ‬
‫ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻳﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻣﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪ :‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫ﺳﻘﻑ ﻗﻭﻱ ﻭﻣﺗﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻝ‬
‫ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻝ‬
‫‪A .Fig‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻏﻲ ﻟﻭﻟﺑﺔ‬
‫)‪M5 × 12‬ﻣﻡ(‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻏﻲ ﻟﻭﻟﺑﺔ‬
‫)‪ M4 × 12‬ﻣﻡ(‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻳﺑﺔ‬
‫‪ 262‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻳﺯﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻝ‬
‫‪ 1,000‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻳﺯﻳﺩ‬
‫‪ .4.2‬ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬
‫ﻁﻘﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻁﻘﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺯﻝ ﻟﻠﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ‬
‫‪UTY-XWZXZC‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ‬
‫)ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ ‪(CNB01 /‬‬
‫‪UTY-XWZXZB‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫)ﻁﺭﻑ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺩ ‪(CNA01 /‬‬
‫‪UTY-XWZXZD‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫)ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻼﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻑ ‪(CNA02 /‬‬
‫‪UTY-XWZXZ7‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﺟﺑﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻣﻭﺳﺗﺎﺕ‬
‫)ﻁﺭﻑ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺩ ‪(CNA03 /‬‬
‫‪UTY-XWZXZE‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﺟﺑﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻣﻭﺳﺗﺎﺕ‬
‫)ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻼﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻑ ‪(CNA04 /‬‬
‫‪UTZ-KXGC‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻘﻑ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ‪ 80 %‬ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ‪ 30‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1,800‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪H‬‬
‫‪ 1,000‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻳﺯﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻳﺔ‬
‫‪Ar-2‬‬
‫‪2017/12/21 17:03:22‬‬
‫‪9371022611_IM_Ar.indd 2‬‬
‫‪ :H‬ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺳﻘﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪ :‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ )ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ‪(ø25.4‬‬
‫‪99‬‬
‫‪AUXB24 AUXB18 AUXB14 AUXB12 AUXB09 AUXB07 AUXB04‬‬
‫‪146‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﻘﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻊ‬
‫‪262‬‬
‫* ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺳﻘﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪245‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪3,000‬‬
‫‪3,000‬‬
‫‪3,000‬‬
‫‪40‬‬
‫‪30‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪2,700‬‬
‫‪2,700‬‬
‫‪2,700‬‬
‫‪2,700‬‬
‫‪2,700‬‬
‫‪2,700‬‬
‫‪2,700‬‬
‫‪3,000‬‬
‫‪102‬‬
‫‪40‬‬
‫‪) H‬ﻣﻡ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺍﺯ‬
‫‪D .Fig‬‬
‫‪123‬‬
‫‪ .3.3‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء‬
‫‪58‬‬
‫‪30‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ * B .Fig‬ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻫﻭﺍء ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻣﻥ ‪ 3‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 4‬ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺗﺑﻌًﺎ ﻟﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪ :‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻓﺔ ﻭﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 100‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ‬
‫* ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻓﺫ‪ ،‬ﻧﻭﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﻬﻭﺍء‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻔﺫ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﻬﻭﺍء‪) .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻳﺑﺔ ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻘﻑ‬
‫ﺻﻧﺩﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺋﻝ‬
‫ﺻﺎﻣﻭﻟﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ‪A‬‬
‫‪ 30‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺧﻁﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻣﺎﻭﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪ 3‬ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻫﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﺻﺎﻣﻭﻟﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ‪B‬‬
‫)‪ 4‬ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻫﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻘﻑ‬
‫ﻣﺳﻣﺎﺭ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ‬
‫‪ .4.3‬ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫‪19‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺗﻛﻳﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻪ ﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺣﻣﻝ ﻳﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪ 5‬ﺃﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﻛﻥ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻗﻭﻳًﺎ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻔﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﺳﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻧﺎﻙ ﺧﻁﺭ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﻔﻛﻭﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻭﺧﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺫﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺧﻁﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﻌﻝ ﻣﻭﺍﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻣﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺳﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺭﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻣﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻪ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﻣﻳﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ ﻓﻳﻧﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻲء ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺎء‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﻣﻝ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﻗﻳﻕ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ‬
‫ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻝ ﺣﻳﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺟﺎﻧﺏ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ ﻋﺎﻟﻳًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻁﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻁﻔﻭ ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺑﺏ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺭﺍﻁﻳﻡ ﻓﻳﻧﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﻣﻳﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ ﻓﻳﻧﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﻲء ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺎء‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﻣﻝ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﻗﻳﻕ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺗﻛﻳﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﻛﺎﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪(1‬‬
‫)‪(2‬‬
‫)‪(3‬‬
‫)‪(4‬‬
‫)‪(5‬‬
‫)‪(6‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺛﻘﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺳﻘﻑ )‪.(D .Fig‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﺳﺎﻣﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ)‪ ،(M10‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ‪.C .Fig‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻣﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ‪ ،A‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ‪ B‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺳﻣﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ )‪.(D .Fig‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺳﻣﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺍﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻣﻭﻟﺔ ‪ B‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺭﻙ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻷﺟﻝ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﺑﻠﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪ :‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺥ ﺍﻟﺣﺫﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻻ ﺗﺩﺧﻝ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻏﺭﻳﺑﺔ )ﺍﻟﺯﻳﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭﻩ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﻁﺭﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ‪ .R410A‬ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺳﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺎﺕ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﻁ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻟﺣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻔﺦ ﻏﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻧﻳﺗﺭﻭﺟﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻑ ﻋﺑﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪C .Fig‬‬
‫‪) 530‬ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺳﻣﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ(‬
‫‪ .1.4‬ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺁﺧﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪) A‬ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻳﺑﺔ(‬
‫‪) B‬ﻓﺗﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻘﻑ(‬
‫‪) 570‬ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ(‬
‫‪) 540‬ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺳﻣﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺟﻭﺍﻧﺏ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻧﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻠﻭﺙ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﺻﺎﺹ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻛﺳﻳﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺑﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻘﺎﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺯﻳﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪75‬‬
‫‪135‬‬
‫‪ 150‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪200‬‬
‫ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻳﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﺧﺩﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺣﺩ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ‪450‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪700‬‬
‫‪ 580‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪660‬‬
‫‪ 580‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪610‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﻧﺣﺎﺱ ﺗﻌﺭﺿﺕ ﻟﻠﺗﻠﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻛﺳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺃﺟﺯﺍﺋﻬﺎ )ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ(‪ .‬ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺻﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺳﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻧﺑﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﻌﺭﻱ ﻟﻼﻧﺳﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻠﻭﺛﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء‪ .‬ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺗﻛﻳﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ R410A‬ﻳﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﺩﻱ )‪ ،(R22‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪250‬‬
‫‪620‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﻧﺣﺎﺱ ﻋﺩﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﺣﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺩﺓ‪ :‬ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﻧﺣﺎﺱ ﻋﺩﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﺣﺎﻡ ﻣﺧﺗﺯﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺳﻔﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺄﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻲ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ‪ 40‬ﻣﺟﻡ‪ 10/‬ﻣﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ ﺳﻣﺎﻛﺔ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ R410A‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﻧﺣﺎﺱ ﺃﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻟﻭ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻣﺎﻛﺔ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺩﻧﺔ )‪(R410A‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ]ﻣﻡ )ﺑﻭﺻﺔ([‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻛﺔ ]ﻣﻡ[‬
‫‪(1/4) 6.35‬‬
‫‪0.80‬‬
‫‪(3/8) 9.52‬‬
‫‪0.80‬‬
‫‪(1/2) 12.70‬‬
‫‪0.80‬‬
‫‪(5/8) 15.88‬‬
‫‪1.00‬‬
‫‪(3/4) 19.05‬‬
‫‪1.20‬‬
‫ﺑﺣﺩ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ‪450‬‬
‫‪Ar-3‬‬
‫‪2017/12/21 17:03:21‬‬
‫‪9371022611_IM_Ar.indd 3‬‬
‫‪ .3.3.4‬ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ‬
‫‪ .2.4‬ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺭﺑﻁ ﺻﺎﻣﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﻠﻳﺞ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺳﻙ ﻗﺎﺭﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ ﺑﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﺭﺑﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺭﺑﻁ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺯﻡ ﺭﺑﻁ ﺻﺎﻣﻭﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻔﻠﻳﺞ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺻﻑ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﻓﺭﻕ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ ﻟﻠﻣﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ .3.4‬ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺗﻔﻠﻳﺞ )ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻣﺎﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻠﺟﺔ ﺑﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺭﺑﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻧﻛﺳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻣﺎﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻠﺟﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﻏﺎﺯ ﺧﻁﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻬﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1.3.4‬ﺍﻟﺗﻔﻠﻳﺞ‬
‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ(‬
‫ﺻﺎﻣﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﻔﻠﺟﺔ ]ﻣﻡ )ﺑﻭﺻﺔ([‬
‫ﻋﺯﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﻁ ]ﻧﻳﻭﺗﻥ ﻣﺗﺭ )ﻛﺟﻡ ﻗﻭﺓ·ﺳﻡ([‬
‫‪ (1/4) 6.35‬ﻗﻁﺭ‬
‫‪ 16‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 160) 18‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(180‬‬
‫‪ (3/8) 9.52‬ﻗﻁﺭ‬
‫‪ 32‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 320) 42‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(420‬‬
‫‪ (1/2) 12.70‬ﻗﻁﺭ‬
‫‪ 49‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 490) 61‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(610‬‬
‫‪ (5/8) 15.88‬ﻗﻁﺭ‬
‫‪ 63‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 630) 75‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(750‬‬
‫‪ (3/4) 19.05‬ﻗﻁﺭ‬
‫‪ 90‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 900) 110‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(1,100‬‬
‫‪ .4.4‬ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﻔﻠﻳﺞ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ‪.R410A‬‬
‫)‪ (1‬ﺍﻗﻁﻊ ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﻁﻊ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (2‬ﺍﻣﺳﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﺗﺩﺧﻝ ﻗﺻﺎﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻭﺍﺋﺏ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (3‬ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻣﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻠﺟﺔ )ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻣﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻠﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ )ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ‪ (RB‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﻟﻲ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﻠﻳﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﻔﻠﻳﺞ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﻔﻠﻳﺞ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ‪ .R410A‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ‬
‫ﻟﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺻﻣﺎﻭﻳﻝ ﻣﻔﻠﺟﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (4‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻕ ﻗﺭﺻﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺻﻘﻬﺎ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺑﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺣﺹ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻔﻠﻳﺞ ]‪ [L‬ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﺳﻕ ﺃﻡ ﻻ ﻭﺃﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻠﻛﺳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﻓﺣﺹ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ )ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻗﺎﻟﺏ‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ )ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﺣﻭﻝ ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ ﻭﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻠﻑ ﻛﻼ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺑﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﻓﻳﻧﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ‬
‫ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺃﻱ ﻓﺟﻭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ 2‬ﺍﺛﻧﻳﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻼﺕ )ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻝ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺎﺯﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﺗﻁﻭﻕ ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺑﻌﺎﺯﻝ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ )ﻛﺑﻳﺭ(‬
‫)ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑُﻌﺩ ‪] A‬ﻣﻡ[‬
‫ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﻠﻳﺞ ﻟـ ‪ ،R410A‬ﻣﻥ ﻧﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺽ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫‪9.1‬‬
‫‪(3/8) 9.52‬‬
‫‪(1/2) 12.70‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ( ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺋﻝ(‪ .‬ﺍﻹﺧﻔﺎﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪16.6‬‬
‫‪(5/8) 15.88‬‬
‫‪19.7‬‬
‫‪(3/4) 19.05‬‬
‫‪24.0‬‬
‫‪ .5‬ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﻠﻳﺞ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﺩﻳﺔ )‪ (R22‬ﻟﺗﻔﻠﻳﺞ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ‪ ،R410A‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﺩ ‪ A‬ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ‪ 0.5‬ﻣﻡ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ )ﻟﻠﺗﻔﻠﻳﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺗﻔﻠﻳﺞ ‪ (R410A‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﺗﺣﻘﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﻠﻳﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺳﻣﺎﻛﺔ ﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺑُﻌﺩ‬
‫‪ .A‬ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﻔﻠﻳﺞ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ‪.R410A‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ]ﻣﻡ‬
‫)ﺑﻭﺻﺔ([‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻣﺳﻁﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻣﻭﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻠﺟﺔ ]ﻣﻡ[‬
‫‪(1/4) 6.35‬‬
‫‪17‬‬
‫‪(3/8) 9.52‬‬
‫‪22‬‬
‫‪(1/2) 12.70‬‬
‫‪26‬‬
‫‪(5/8) 15.88‬‬
‫‪29‬‬
‫‪(3/4) 19.05‬‬
‫‪36‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺩﺧﻝ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﻏﺎﺯ ﻛﺑﺭﻳﺗﻳﺗﻲ‪) .‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺗﺂﻛﻝ ﻟﻠﻣﺑﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ(‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺯﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺗﻘﻁﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺭﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺋﻲ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺭﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﻔﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺭﻳﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺿﻊ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻻﺻﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺭﻳﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺳﻡ‪) .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ(‬
‫•‬
‫‪ .2.3.4‬ﺛﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺷﻛﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻭﺥ ﺍﻟﺣﺫﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺛﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺑﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ‪ 90‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺛﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻣﺩﻳﺩﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻌﺏ ﺛﻧﻳﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻣﺩﻳﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺛﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺗﻣﺩﻫﺎ ﻷﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪ 3‬ﻣﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﻓﺣﺹ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ )ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪13.2‬‬
‫‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪0.5‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ )ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫‪] B-0.4‬ﻣﻡ[‬
‫‪(1/4) 6.35‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺻﺎﻣﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﻔﻠﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺭﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻣﺳﻙ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﻁ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻘﺑﺿﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺣﺗﻔﻅ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺭﺑﻁ ﺻﺎﻣﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﻠﻳﺞ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﺑﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻁﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﺎﺋﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﻹﺧﻔﺎﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ‪ 120‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ )ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻛﺳﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻗﻊ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ‪ ،70%‬ﻓﻘﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻗﻊ ‪ 70‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،80%‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺳُﻣﻙ ‪ 15‬ﻣﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻗﻌﺔ ﺗﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ‪ ،80%‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﺳُﻣﻙ ‪ 20‬ﻣﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﻛﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﺳُﻣﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺗﻛﺛﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﻘﺩﺭﺓ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ 0.045‬ﻭﺍﺕ‪)/‬ﻣﻳﻠﻲ ﻛﻳﻠﻔﻥ( ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ )ﻋﻧﺩ ‪ 20‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ]ﻣﻡ‬
‫)ﺑﻭﺻﺔ([‬
‫ﺍﺭﺑﻁ ﺑﻣﻔﺗﺎﺣﻳﻥ ‪.2‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻧﺣﺩﺍﺭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ )‪ 1/100‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (1/50‬ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺍﻧﺧﻔﺎﺿﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺣﺗﺑﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺭﻳﻑ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﺱ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺗﺩﻓﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺍﻛﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺳﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻭﻟﻳﻔﻳﻧﻳﻝ ﻛﻠﻭﺭﻳﺩ ﺻﻠﺑﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ )‪] (VP25‬ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ‪ 32‬ﻣﻡ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻧﻔﺫ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻧﺯﻑ ﻫﻭﺍﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﻧﻔﺟﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻣﻝ ﻋﺯﻝ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪) VP25‬ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ‪ 32‬ﻣﻡ(‬
‫ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻥ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻧﺣﺩﺍﺭ ﻛﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﻣﻝ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻟﻠﺻﺭﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1.5‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 2‬ﻣﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﻛﺳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺛﻧﻳﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺛﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻣﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﻧﻛﺳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪) VP25‬ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ‪ 32‬ﻣﻡ(‬
‫ﺍﻧﺣﺩﺍﺭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ‪ 1/100‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪1/50‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﻅﻭﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﺯﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﺑﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺭﻓﻊ‬
‫‪Ar-4‬‬
‫‪2017/12/21 17:03:21‬‬
‫‪9371022611_IM_Ar.indd 4‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ‪ :‬ﻓﺣﺹ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ‬
‫• ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ‪ 700‬ﻣﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻘﻑ‪ .‬ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺑُﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺭﺃﺳﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ‪ 300‬ﻣﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻛﺏ ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 1‬ﻟﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻥ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺩﻓﻕ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻧﺩﻯ‪ .‬ﺍﻓﺣﺹ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻏﻳﺭ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻳﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻣﺿﺧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺣﺩﺍﺭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ‬
‫‪ 1/100‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪1/50‬‬
‫‪ 300‬ﻣﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‬
‫‪) VP25‬ﻗﻁﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ‪ 32‬ﻣﻡ(‬
‫ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﻣﺣﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ‬
‫ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ‬
‫‪ 700‬ﻣﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺭﻏﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺣﺩﺍﺭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ‬
‫‪ .6‬ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪) VP30‬ﻗﻁﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ‪ 38‬ﻣﻡ( ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﺣﺩﺍﺭ ﺳﻔﻠﻲ ‪ 1/100‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪1/50‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‬
‫‪ 700‬ﻣﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻭﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺷﺧﺹ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﺑﻣﻭﺟﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﻭﻁﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻳﻣﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻔﺫﺓ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻭﺍﺩﺙ ﺧﻁﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﺛﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺷﻭﺏ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺟﺭﻱ ﺗﺯﻭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ‬
‫)‪(1‬‬
‫)‪(2‬‬
‫)‪(3‬‬
‫)‪(4‬‬
‫)‪(5‬‬
‫)‪(6‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺭﻳﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺳﻡ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺭﺍﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ ﺿﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻻﺻﻘﺔ ﻓﻳﻧﻳﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻕ ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ )ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ‪ PVC‬ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ‪ (VP25‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺻﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺳﺎﻭﻱ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻭﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ(‬
‫ﺍﻓﺣﺹ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ‪) .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ(‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﻟﻌﺯﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺭﻳﻑ ﻭﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺭﺑﻁ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺳﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺑﺽ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻭﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻪ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻗﻭﻯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﺗﺅﺛﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺣﻛﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻭﺍﺩﺙ ﺧﻁﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺧﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺷﻭﺏ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺻﻧﺩﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﺩﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺏ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺣﻭﺍﺩﺙ ﺧﻁﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻠﻐﺑﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺃﻛﻣﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻓﺗﺣﺎﺕ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﺭﺍﻥ ﻷﺟﻝ ﺗﻣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‪ .‬ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﻗﺻﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ ﻭﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺣﺩﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﺻ ﱢﻧﻊ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺯﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺷﻭﺏ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﺩﻝ ﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﺗﻣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻔﺭﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺯﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺷﻭﺏ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻳﻧﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﺩﺓ ﻣﺣﻠﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ )ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ‪ .(RB‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﻁﺋﺔ ﻟﻸﺳﻼﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺣﺗﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ‬
‫)ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ‬
‫)ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺎﺳﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻭﺍء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‪ ،‬ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻁﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺷﻭﺏ‬
‫ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺷﺑﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‪) .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﺩﺵ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ‬
‫ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﺭﻓﻕ )ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻗﺎﻁﻊ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻗﺎﻁﻊ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪ .‬ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ )ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺭﻳﺽ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺭﻳﺽ )ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﻷﺭﺽ( ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻼﻣﺱ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻳﺩﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻛﻳﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺑﺄﻣﺎﻥ ﻭﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺇﻳﺟﺎﺑﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻳﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺷﻭﺏ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻠﻑ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻟﻪ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻ ﱢﻧﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻛﻳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﺅﻫﻠﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻣﺎﺛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺭ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (a‬ﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﻋﻠﻭﻱ‬
‫)‪ (b‬ﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺟﺎﻧﺑﻲ‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 10‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫‪ 35‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻼﺻﻕ‬
‫ﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺄﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﻣﻁﻠ ًﻘﺎ ﺭﺑﻁ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﻭﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﺑﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ‪ 50‬ﻣﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺭﺑﻁ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻭء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻁﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 20‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫ﺟﺯء ﻣﺭﺋﻲ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻣﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‬
‫)‪ (d‬ﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﻋﻠﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺭﺽ )ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺭﻳﺽ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ )ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺭﻳﺽ( ﺑﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﻏﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺿﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺃﺭﺿﻲ )ﺗﺄﺭﻳﺽ( ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﻷﺭﺽ )ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺭﻳﺽ( ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ ﺻﺭﻑ‬
‫‪ 20‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫ﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺻﺭﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﻣﻊ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎء ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻛﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺗﻌﻁﻝ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺑﺈﻧﺷﺎء ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺃﺭﺿﻳﺔ )ﺗﺄﺭﻳﺽ( ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ )ﻗﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ‪ 10‬ﺛﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﻟﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺎﺗﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻠﻣﺱ ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﻟﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (c‬ﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺭﺍﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ .1.6‬ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫• ﻧﻭﻉ ﻭﺣﺟﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻭﺍﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻁﻧﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺩ‬
‫‪ 230‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ 198‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 264‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ )‪ 50‬ﻫﺭﺗﺯ(‬
‫‪ 198‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 253‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ )‪ 60‬ﻫﺭﺗﺯ(‬
‫• ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﻔﻕ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻔﺭﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﻁﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﺳﻠﻙ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻧﺧﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺩ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ‪ .2%‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﻁﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﺟﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪Ar-5‬‬
‫‪2017/12/21 17:03:21‬‬
‫‪9371022611_IM_Ar.indd 5‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻗﺎﻁﻊ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻗﺎﻁﻊ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺑﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺿﻣﻥ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻧﻔﺱ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﻋﺎﺑﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﻣﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻭﻁ ‪ A‬ﻭ‪ B‬ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .A‬ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺍﺯ‬
‫‪MCA‬‬
‫‪AUXB04GBLH‬‬
‫‪ 0.20‬ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪AUXB07GALH‬‬
‫‪ 0.20‬ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪AUXB09GALH‬‬
‫‪ 0.20‬ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪AUXB12GALH‬‬
‫‪ 0.24‬ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪AUXB14GALH‬‬
‫‪ 0.29‬ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪AUXB18GALH‬‬
‫‪ 0.30‬ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪AUXB24GALH‬‬
‫‪ 0.75‬ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :MCA MFA‬ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻗﺩﺭﺓ ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ :MFA‬ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﻗﺩﺭﺓ ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺻﻬﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﻋﺎﺑﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﻣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻟـ‬
‫‪ MCA‬ﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ‪ RB‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ‪ 15‬ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ‪ MCA‬ﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ‪ ،RB‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ‪.RB‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻗﺩﺭﺓ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ‪ RB‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ‬
‫‪ 20‬ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﻭﺍﻁﻊ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﻁﻊ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺑﻘﺩﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3.6‬ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1.3.6‬ﻛﺑﻝ ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻁﻭﻝ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﻁ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 20‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺭﻳﺽ )ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ(‬
‫‪ 50‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫‪ .A‬ﻟﻸﺳﻼﻙ ﺑﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﻣﺻﻣﺕ‬
‫)‪(1‬‬
‫)‪(2‬‬
‫)‪(3‬‬
‫‪ .B‬ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻣﻌﺩﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ‬
‫* ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﻋﺩﺩ "ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ" ﺃﻭ "ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ‪ +‬ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ‪"RB‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻗﺩﺭﺓ ﻗﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ 30‬ﻣﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ‪ 0.1 ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‬
‫‪ 100‬ﻣﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ‪ 0.1 ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‬
‫‪ 45‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪** 148‬‬
‫)‪(4‬‬
‫)‪(5‬‬
‫)‪(6‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻁﻁ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﻣﻝ ﻁﻳﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺛﺑﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻔﻙ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻟﺭﺑﻁ ﺑﺭﺍﻏﻲ ﺍﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻔﻙ ﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻠﻑ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻏﻲ ﻭﻳﻣﻧﻊ ﺭﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻏﻲ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺭﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻏﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻔﺭﻁ‪ ،‬ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻧﻛﺳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻏﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺯﻡ ﺭﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻏﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ‪ 2‬ﻛﺑﻠﻲ ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺭﻏﻲ ‪ 1‬ﻭﺍﺣﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺯﻉ ‪ 25‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫* ﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﺿﺧﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻓﺋﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻓﺋﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ‪.RB‬‬
‫** ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﻗﺎﻁﻊ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﻗﺩﺭﺓ ‪ 100‬ﻣﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻘﺳﻳﻡ ﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ‪ 44‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﻗﺎﻁﻊ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﻗﺩﺭﺓ ‪ 30‬ﻣﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻏﻲ ﺑﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫‪ .1.1.6‬ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻼﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ )ﻣﻡ (‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪2.5‬‬
‫ﻧﻭﻉ ‪ IEC57 60245‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻛﺑﻝ ‪ +‬ﺃﺭﺿﻲ )ﺗﺄﺭﻳﺽ(‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ‬
‫‪0.33‬‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ‬
‫‪LONWORKS‬‬
‫ﺳﻠﻙ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ 22‬ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺭﻳﻛﻲ )‪ (AWG‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ‪4‬‬
‫)‪ (NEMA‬ﺛﻧﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﻏﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻁﺑﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﻣﺻﻣﺕ ﺛﻧﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﻭﻑ ﺑﻘﻁﺭ ‪ 0.65‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ )ﻧﻭﻉ ﺛﻧﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﻠﻙ(‬
‫‪ 0.33‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪1.25‬‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ‪ PVC‬ﻣﻐﻠﻑ*‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﺛﻧﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻠﻔﻭﻑ‪ ،‬ﻣﺯﺩﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯ‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﻗﻁﺑﻲ‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ )ﻧﻭﻉ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ(‬
‫‪0.33‬‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ‪ PVC‬ﻣﻐﻠﻑ*‬
‫ﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﻗﻁﺎﺏ‬
‫*‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ﻣﻐﻠﻑ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻭﺍﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﺑﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2.6‬ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‬
‫ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ )ﺣﻠﻘﺔ(‬
‫ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ )ﺣﻠﻘﺔ(‬
‫ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﺑﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﻣﺻﻣﺕ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻁﺭﻑ ﺣﻠﻘﻲ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﺑﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﻣﺻﻣﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻁﺭﻑ ﺣﻠﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ‬
‫ﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻟﻠﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﻲ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻠﻑ ﻭﻳﺳﺑﺏ ﺳﺧﻭﻧﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺑﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .B‬ﻟﻸﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺩﻭﻟﺔ‬
‫)‪(1‬‬
‫)‪(2‬‬
‫)‪(3‬‬
‫)‪(4‬‬
‫)‪(5‬‬
‫)‪(6‬‬
‫)‪(7‬‬
‫ﻣﺛﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺭﻏﻲ ﺑﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺣﻠﻘﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﻛﻣﺎﻡ ﻋﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﺷﻳﻕ ﺍﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﻳﺔ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﻣﻔﻛﻭﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺛﺑﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻔﻙ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻟﺭﺑﻁ ﺑﺭﺍﻏﻲ ﺍﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻔﻙ ﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻠﻑ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻏﻲ ﻭﻳﻣﻧﻊ ﺭﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻏﻲ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺭﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻏﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻔﺭﻁ‪ ،‬ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻧﻛﺳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻏﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺯﻡ ﺭﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻏﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ‪ 2‬ﻛﺑﻠﻲ ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺭﻏﻲ ‪ 1‬ﻭﺍﺣﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ‪1* RB‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻑ ﺣﻠﻘﻲ‬
‫ﻧﺯﻉ ‪ 10‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ‬
‫ُﻛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫‪*2‬‬
‫‪*3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫‪*2‬‬
‫‪*3‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻏﻲ ﺑﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ‬
‫‪*2‬‬
‫‪*3‬‬
‫ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺭﻏﻲ ﺑﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﻁﺭﻑ ﺣﻠﻘﻲ‬
‫ﻁﺭﻑ ﺣﻠﻘﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻋﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﻗﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ )ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺯﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﻁ‬
‫)ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﻋﺎﺑﺭﺓ ﻹﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫ﺑﺭﻏﻲ ‪) M4‬ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪(GND ،N ،L/‬‬
‫‪ 1.2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 1.8‬ﻧﻳﻭﺗﻥ ﻣﺗﺭ )‪ 12‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 18‬ﻛﺟﻡ ﻗﻭﺓ ﺳﻡ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺣﻠﻘﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺑﻁ ﺑﺭﺍﻏﻲ ﺍﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺯﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﺳﺧﻭﻧﺔ ﺯﺍﺋﺩﺓ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻣﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺷﺩﻳﺩ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ :1‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻓﺋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ‪.RB‬‬
‫*‪ :2‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺄﺭﻳﺽ )ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﻷﺭﺽ( ﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺗﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺗﺄﺭﻳﺽ )ﺃﺭﺿﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫*‪ :3‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺛﻧﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪.Y3‬‬
‫ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻧﺩﻭﻕ ﺳﺣﺏ‬
‫ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻧﺩﻭﻕ‬
‫ﺳﺣﺏ‬
‫ﻗﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪Ar-6‬‬
‫‪2017/12/21 17:03:21‬‬
‫‪9371022611_IM_Ar.indd 6‬‬
‫‪ .2.3.6‬ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﻭﻛﺑﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟﺔ‬
‫)‪(SW1‬‬
‫‪ 30‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫‪ :Y3،Y2،Y1‬ﻛﺑﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫‪ 40‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﻣﻐﻠﻑ )ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺭﻗﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻧﻭﻉ ﺛﻧﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‬
‫‪2WIRE‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ )ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ(‬
‫)ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ(‬
‫‪:X2 ،X1‬‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻧﻭﻉ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‬
‫‪ 30‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫‪SW1‬‬
‫‪ 30‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻧﻭﻉ ﺛﻧﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﺑﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻭﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﻅﻭﺭ‬
‫‪3WIRE‬‬
‫ﺟﻳﺩ‬
‫‪ :Y1‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻗﻁﺑﻲ‬
‫‪ :Y2‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻗﻁﺑﻲ‬
‫‪ :Y3‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻪ *‪1‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟﺔ )‪ 2 (SW1‬ﺳﻠﻙ )ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﻧﻭﻉ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‬
‫‪ :Y1‬ﺃﺣﻣﺭ‬
‫‪ :Y2‬ﺃﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫‪ :Y3‬ﺃﺳﻭﺩ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺳﻠﻙ‬
‫*‪ :1‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﺑﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻑ ‪ ،Y3‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺛﻧﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﻟﻥ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻁﺭ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ‪ 1‬ﻭﺍﺣﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺑﻁ ﺑﺭﺍﻏﻲ ﺍﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺯﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﺳﺧﻭﻧﺔ ﺯﺍﺋﺩﺓ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻣﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺷﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺯﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺑﺭﻏﻲ ‪) M3‬ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ‪) (X2 ،X1/‬ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪(Y3 ،Y2 ،Y1 /‬‬
‫‪ 0.5‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0.6‬ﻧﻳﻭﺗﻥ ﻣﺗﺭ )‪ 5‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 6‬ﻛﺟﻡ ﻗﻭﺓ ﺳﻡ(‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺷﺑﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻘﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪:N ،L‬‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﺭﻏﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﻁ ﻟﻠﺑﺭﻏﻲ‪ .‬ﻣﻥ ﻧﺎﺣﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻏﻲ‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻁﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻁﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4.6‬ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‬
‫)‪ (3‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺻﻧﺩﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (1‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺻﻧﺩﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻭﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻛﻝ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻏﻁﺎء ﺻﻧﺩﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺭﻏﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺣﺯﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻣﺩﺩ ﻛﺑﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ )ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ( ﻭﻛﺑﻝ ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺳﺑﺏ ﻋﻁﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .5.6‬ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ 1.5.6‬ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺷﻐﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻷﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻁﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻔﻙ ﻣﻌﺯﻭﻝ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟﺔ )‪(SET 2‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ‬
‫)‪(CNB01‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪SW4‬‬
‫‪SW3‬‬
‫‪SW2‬‬
‫‪SW1‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻑ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺩ‬
‫)‪(CNA01‬‬
‫)‪(CNA03‬‬
‫)‪(CNA02‬‬
‫)‪ (2‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺭﺍﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(CNA04‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟﺔ )‪ ،(SW1‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﻠﻑ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪CNA01‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻼﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻁﺭﻑ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺩ‬
‫ﻟﻺﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫‪CNA03‬‬
‫‪CNA02‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻼﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟﺔ ‪SET 2‬‬
‫‪((SW2‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫‪CNB01‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ‬
‫‪CNA04‬‬
‫ﻟﻺﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫‪Ar-7‬‬
‫‪2017/12/21 17:03:21‬‬
‫‪9371022611_IM_Ar.indd 7‬‬
‫‪ 2.5.6‬ﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻠﺣﺎﻡ ﻭﻋﺯﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ‬
‫‪CNB01‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻧﺔ ﻷﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻼﺕ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪CNA01‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺻﻝ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ‬
‫)ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‬
‫)ﻳﺗﻡ ﺷﺭﺍﺅﻩ ﻣﺣﻠﻳًﺎ(‬
‫‪CNA02‬‬
‫‪CNA01‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﻝ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪1‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﻝ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪2‬‬
‫)‪ (1‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ ﺑﻣﻭﺻﻝ ﻁﻘﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (2‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺭﻳﺩﻩ ﻣﺣﻠﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻭﺻﻝ ﻏﻠﻳﻅ ﻣﻌﺯﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻌﺩ‬
‫ﻟﺭﺑﻁ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﻘﻡ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (3‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ ﻣﻊ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﺣﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫‪ 12‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 24‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫‪CNA01‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ‬
‫‪CNA01‬‬
‫● ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻑ )]‪([CNA04] ،[CNA02‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻱ ﺗﺯﻭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻑ‬
‫)]‪.([CNA04] ،[CNA02‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫‪CNA02‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ )ﻳﺗﻡ ﺷﺭﺍﺅﻩ ﻣﺣﻠﻳًﺎ(‪:‬‬
‫ﺭﺑﻁ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ‬
‫‪CNA03‬‬
‫‪CNA04‬‬
‫*‪c‬‬
‫ﻗﻧﺎﺓ ‪2‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﺿﻲ‬
‫*‪d‬‬
‫*‪c‬‬
‫ﻗﻧﺎﺓ ‪1‬‬
‫*‪c‬‬
‫ﻗﻧﺎﺓ ‪3‬‬
‫‪CNA04‬‬
‫‪ .6.6‬ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ )ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ‬
‫)‪ (1‬ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺍﺭﺉ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺇﺟﺑﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ CNA01‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ CNA02‬ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ" ﺃﻭ "ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺍﺭﺉ" ﺃﻭ "ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﺟﺑﺎﺭﻱ" ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺇﺟﺑﺎﺭﻳًﺎ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻣﻭﺳﺗﺎﺕ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ CNA03‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ CNA04‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺛﻧﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻠﻔﻭﻑ )ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ .(AWG22‬ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﻁﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﻛﺑﻝ ‪ 150‬ﻣﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺑﻌًﺎ ﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺧﻁ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ c‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﻼﻣﺳﺎﺕ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺗﻳﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿًﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ‪ 12‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ‪ 1‬ﻣﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫*‪ d‬ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺩ‪ .‬ﻛﻥ ﺣﺫﺭً ﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﻭﺹ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺄﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻑ ﻟﻌﺩﺓ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺯﻝ ﻛﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺭﺣﻝ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺗﺑﻌًﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ‪) .‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻋﻳﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪(.‬‬
‫‪K1‬‬
‫‪K4‬‬
‫‪CNA02‬‬
‫● ﻁﺭﻑ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺩ )]‪([CNA03] ،[CNA01‬‬
‫‪CNA01‬‬
‫*‪a‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪1‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﻝ‬
‫*‪a‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪3‬‬
‫‪CNA03‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﻝ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﻝ‬
‫*‪a‬‬
‫‪K2‬‬
‫‪K5‬‬
‫‪CNA02‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫*‪b‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫*‪ 1‬ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫‪ 12‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 24‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺭﺣﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻱ ﺗﺯﻭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﺭﻑ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺩ )]‪،[CNA01‬‬
‫]‪.([CNA03‬‬
‫‪K3‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪1‬‬
‫‪K6‬‬
‫‪CNA02‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪2‬‬
‫‪ :K6 - K1‬ﻣﺭﺣﻝ‬
‫)ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ(‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﻌﺩﺓ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻁﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ‬
‫*‪ 1‬ﺍﺟﻌﻝ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ 12‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 24‬ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪ .‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﻗﺩﺭﺓ ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻓﺎﺋﺽ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺟﻬﺩًﺍ ﻳﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ‪ 24‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻣﻳﺭ ‪ 2-1‬ﻭ‪.3-1‬‬
‫*‪ a‬ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻭ ‪ 5‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 10‬ﻣﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‪ 5 :‬ﻣﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ(‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺣﻣﻝ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺻﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ‪ 10‬ﻣﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﻼﻣﺳﺎﺕ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺗﻳﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿًﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ‪ 12‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ‪ 1‬ﻣﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫*‪ b‬ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺑﻳﺔ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ]‪ [+‬ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺎﺭ ‪ 1‬ﻭ ]‪ [-‬ﻟﻠﻣﺳﻣﺎﺭ ‪ 2‬ﻭ‪ .3‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺩ ﻟﻌﺩﺓ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺗﻔﺭﻳﻌﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺻﻧﺩﻭﻕ ﺳﺣﺏ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻠﻭﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺣﺯ‬
‫● ﻧﻭﻉ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﻣﺑﺩﻟﺔ ﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪[SW2 2‬‬
‫ﻧﺑﺽ‬
‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ(‬
‫ﺣﺯ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻧﺑﺽ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﺑﺽ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺃﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ ‪ 200‬ﻣﻳﻠﻲ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻫﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ"‪.‬‬
‫]ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ "ﺣﺯ"[‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻝ‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﺓ‪ 1‬ﻟـ ‪ CNA01‬ﺃﻭ ‪CNA02‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ← ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ← ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫]ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ "ﻧﺑﺽ"[‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻝ‬
‫‪ CNA01‬ﺃﻭ ‪CNA02‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﺓ‪1‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ← ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﺓ ‪2‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ← ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫* ﺍﻷﻣﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭ ﻟﻪ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺿﻣﻥ ﻧﻔﺱ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ar-8‬‬
‫‪2017/12/21 17:03:21‬‬
‫‪9371022611_IM_Ar.indd 8‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻫﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺍﺭﺉ"‪.‬‬
‫‪ .7‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ‬
‫]ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ "ﺣﺯ"[‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﺓ‪ 1‬ﻟـ ‪ CNA01‬ﺃﻭ ‪CNA02‬‬
‫ﺛﻣﺔ ‪ 3‬ﻁﺭﻕ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ ﻛﻝ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ )‪ (1‬ﺇﻟﻰ )‪ (3‬ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ← ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺍﺭﺉ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ← ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫]ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ "ﻧﺑﺽ"[‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻝ‬
‫‪ CNA01‬ﺃﻭ ‪CNA02‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﺓ‪1‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ← ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺍﺭﺉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﺓ ‪2‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ← ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫)‪ (1‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪:REF AD SW ،IU AD‬‬
‫ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ )‪ .1.7‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ(‬
‫)‪ (2‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ‪) .‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ REF AD SW ،IU AD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪(0‬‬
‫)‪ (3‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ‪) .‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ REF AD SW ،IU AD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪(0‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫* ﺗﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻧﻔﺱ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺍﺭﺉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻫﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﺟﺑﺎﺭﻱ"‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺷﻐﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻷﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻁﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫]ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ "ﺣﺯ"[‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻔﻙ ﻣﻌﺯﻭﻝ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻝ‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﺓ‪ 1‬ﻟـ ‪ CNA01‬ﺃﻭ ‪CNA02‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ← ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﺟﺑﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ← ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫‪ .1.7‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫]ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ "ﻧﺑﺽ"[‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻝ‬
‫‪ CNA01‬ﺃﻭ ‪CNA02‬‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﺓ‪1‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ← ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﺟﺑﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﺓ ‪2‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ← ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻔﻙ ﻣﻌﺯﻭﻝ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﺟﺑﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺗﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻘﻳﻳﺩ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ "ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ" ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﺟﺑﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺷﻛﻳﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻛﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﺳﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ" ﺃﻭ "ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺍﺭﺉ" ﺃﻭ "ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﺟﺑﺎﺭﻱ" ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪"0" :‬‬
‫ﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪:‬‬
‫"‪"0‬‬
‫● ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﺟﺑﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻣﻭﺳﺗﺎﺕ‬
‫]ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ "ﺣﺯ" ﻓﻘﻁ[‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﺓ ‪ 3‬ﻟـ ‪ CNA03‬ﺃﻭ ‪CNA04‬‬
‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ← ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻣﻭﺳﺗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ← ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪63‬‬
‫ﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪2‬‬
‫‪10×IU AD‬‬
‫)‪ (2‬ﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺛﻧﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻠﻔﻭﻑ )ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ .(22AWG‬ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﻁﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﻛﺑﻝ ‪ 25‬ﻣﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺑﻌًﺎ ﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺩ ﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ‪ :‬ﻣﺭﺗﻔﻊ ‪ 2±12‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ‪ 0‬ﻓﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ‪ 50 :‬ﻣﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‬
‫‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪99‬‬
‫ﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪63‬‬
‫‪10×REF AD‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ‬
‫‪1×REF AD‬‬
‫)‪ (1‬ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭﻩ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ )‪...(1 × IU AD‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ "‪"0‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ )‪...(10 × IU AD‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ "‪"0‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ‪ 1‬ﻭﺣﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ‪ IU AD SW‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ‪.A Table‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪CNB‬‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ‬
‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺭﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺑﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ‪1‬‬
‫‪CNB‬‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ‪2‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ‪3‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺣﻝ )ﻳﺗﻡ ﺷﺭﺍﺅﻩ ﻣﺣﻠﻳًﺎ(‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺳﻠﻭﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻣﻳﺭ ‪2-1‬‬
‫‪CNB01‬‬
‫‪1×IU AD‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻣﻳﺭ ‪3-1‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻣﻳﺭ ‪4-1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺩ ﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ‬
‫‪ 0‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪ 12‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ 0‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫‪ 12‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ‬
‫‪ 0‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺭﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ 12‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺭﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪ (2‬ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ )‪...(1 × REF AD‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ "‪"0‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ )‪...(10 × REF AD‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ "‪"0‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺃﻧﻅﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ REF AD SW‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ‪ A Table‬ﻟﻛﻝ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺱ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ‪A Table‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪IU AD SW‬‬
‫‪REF AD SW‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﻭﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫×‪1‬‬
‫× ‪10‬‬
‫×‪1‬‬
‫× ‪10‬‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ "‪."00‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫)ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪(.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫* ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ )‪ (IU AD SW‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ 64‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.99‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻁﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫‪..‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪..‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪..‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫‪..‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪..‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪..‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪99‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪63‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪Ar-9‬‬
‫‪2017/12/21 17:03:21‬‬
‫‪9371022611_IM_Ar.indd 9‬‬
‫)‪ (3‬ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫‪ (i‬ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ )‪...(RC AD SW‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ "‪"0‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺑـ ‪ 1‬ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ‪ RC AD SW‬ﺿﻣﻥ ﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ ﻣﻥ ‪.0‬‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻝ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪0‬‬
‫‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪15‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ‬
‫‪13‬‬
‫ﺗﺩﻓﻕ ﻫﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﺳﻘﻑ‬
‫‪20‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺗﺩﻓﻕ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺛﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ‪ 4‬ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪23‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫‪RC AD SW‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪RC AD SW‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪RC AD SW‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪RC AD SW‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫‪RC AD‬‬
‫‪SW‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫‪F‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫‪13‬‬
‫‪14‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫ﺍﻁﻼﻕ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﺑﺎﺭﺩ‬
‫‪30‬‬
‫ﺍﻁﻼﻕ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺧﻥ‬
‫‪31‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪40‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﺑﺎﺭﺩ‬
‫‪43‬‬
‫‪ (ii‬ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺛﻧﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ )‪...(RC AD SW‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ "‪"0‬‬
‫• ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻠﺯﻣﻙ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻱ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﻛﻼ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪ .‬ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺭﺟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫• ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺭﻣﺯ ﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ( )ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺣﺗﻰ ‪ 4‬ﺭﻣﻭﺯ‪(.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻫﺩﻑ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻣﻭﺳﺗﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫• ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺭﻣﺯ ﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫‪REF AD‬‬
‫‪RC AD‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟﺔ ‪ ،2 ،SET3 SW1‬ﺑﺎﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪×1‬‬
‫‪IU AD‬‬
‫‪×1‬‬
‫‪×10‬‬
‫‪SET4‬‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫ﺳﻘﻑ ﻣﺭﺗﻔﻊ‬
‫‪00‬‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫ﺭﻓﻊ‬
‫‪00‬‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫‪00‬‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫‪00‬‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ )‪(1‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ )‪(2‬‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ )‪(1‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ )‪(2‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ )‪(3‬‬
‫ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‬
‫‪00‬‬
‫‪00‬‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺩء‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺍﺭﺉ‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﺟﺑﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫‪00‬‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫‪00‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪00‬‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫‪00‬‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻁﻭﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻗﺻﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪×10‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﺧﻁﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻝ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻹﺧﻁﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺑﻛﺭً ﺍ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ .01‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺧﻁﺎﺭ ﻣﺗﺄﺧﺭً ﺍ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪.02‬‬
‫ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ‪ .‬ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ 02‬ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺗﺩﻓﻕ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،01‬ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺗﺩﻓﻕ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﻗﻭﻳًﺎ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻛﻝ ﻋﻠﻳﺑﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ(‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺗﺩﻓﻕ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻓﺗﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺗﺩﻓﻕ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﻣﻌًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻛﻝ ﻋﻠﻳﺑﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ(‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺇﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﺑﺎﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻁﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ .01‬ﻟﺭﻓﻊ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻁﻼﻕ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪.02‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺇﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺧﻥ‪ .‬ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻁﻼﻕ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ‪ 6‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪.01‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻁﻼﻕ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ‪ 4‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ .02‬ﻟﺭﻓﻊ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻁﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪.03‬‬
‫ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﻁﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪46‬‬
‫‪ .2.7‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺭﻣﺯ ﻣﺧﺻﺹ‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫‪RC AD‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‬
‫‪47‬‬
‫‪49‬‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫‪00‬‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫)ﻣﺣﻅﻭﺭ(‬
‫‪60‬‬
‫‪00‬‬
‫)ﻣﺣﻅﻭﺭ(‬
‫‪61‬‬
‫‪00‬‬
‫)ﻣﺣﻅﻭﺭ(‬
‫‪62‬‬
‫‪00‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻝ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻧﻊ ﺗﺩﻓﻕ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻌﻝ ﺗﺩﻓﻕ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء‬
‫ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺑﺩء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻓﺋﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻬﻭﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.01‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﺡ ﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﺑﺑﺩء ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻁﻭﺍﺭﺉ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻁﻭﺍﺭﺉ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺃﻧﻅﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﺟﺑﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻘﻳﻳﺩ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻟﺭﻓﻊ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،01‬ﺗﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻣﻭﺳﺗﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻱ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺛﻧﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﻼﻙ(‬
‫ﻭﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻣﻭﺳﺗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪SET3‬‬
‫‪ .1.3.7‬ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟﺔ "‪"SET3‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟﺔ "‪"SET3‬‬
‫‪SW SW SW SW‬‬
‫‪1 2 3 4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟﺔ ‪SET3‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪SW1‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪SW2‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪) A‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ(‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺷﻐﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻷﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻁﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3.7‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫)‪ (1‬ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ )ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ(‬
‫)‪ (2‬ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ )ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ(‬
‫)‪ (3‬ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ(‬
‫)‪ (4‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺗﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ .1.7‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ" ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ‪ ،EEV‬ﻟﺫﺍ ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻧﻊ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ ﻗﺑﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺃﻓﺣﺹ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺭﺗﻛﺎﺏ ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ar-10‬‬
‫‪2017/12/21 17:03:21‬‬
‫‪9371022611_IM_Ar.indd 10‬‬
‫‪ .2.3.7‬ﻓﺣﺹ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫)‪ (2‬ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ "‪) "MANUAL AUTO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ 3‬ﺛﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﻟﻔﺣﺹ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻱ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (1‬ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻡ ﻟﻣﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻳﺽ )‪ 1.0‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ 1.0/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )ﺃﺧﺿﺭ(‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ )ﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ‪ :‬ﻣﻧﺯﻟﺔ ﻋﺷﺭﻳﺔ )‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ 0.5/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ )ﺃﺣﻣﺭ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ‪ :‬ﻣﻧﺯﻟﺔ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ )‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ 0.5/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫• ﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﻣﺛﺎﻝ( ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ‪24 :‬‬
‫‪ .2.8‬ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻳﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ‪ 12‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪OPERATION‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ( )ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ(‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬
‫‪) TIMER‬ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ(‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ(‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬
‫‪FILTER‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ( )ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ(‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ 10‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪ (1‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻳﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ "‪) "PIPE‬ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ "‪) "DRAIN‬ﺻﺭﻑ(‬
‫• ﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‬
‫)ﻣﺛﺎﻝ( ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ‪30 :‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ‪ 12‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ 1.0‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ 1.0‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ 1.0‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ 1.0‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ 1.0‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ 1.0‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ 1.0‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ 9‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬
‫‪OPERATION‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ( )ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ(‬
‫ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬
‫‪) TIMER‬ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ(‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ(‬
‫ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬
‫‪FILTER‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ( )ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ(‬
‫* ﺑﻣﺣﺎﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻭﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻳﺑﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺧﻁ ﺻﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻏﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻳﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ 00‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪63‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‬
‫‪ 00‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪99‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 7‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻘﻑ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،0‬ﻭﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ .1.7‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ" ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﻭﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 0‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻳﺑﺔ‬
‫)‪ (2‬ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻣﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )ﺃﺧﺿﺭ(‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ; ﻣﻧﺯﻟﺔ ﻋﺷﺭﻳﺔ )‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ 0.5/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ )ﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ(‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ; ﻣﻧﺯﻟﺔ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ )‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ 0.5/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ 0) :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0.5) (9‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ 0.5/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ )ﺃﺣﻣﺭ(‬
‫)ﻣﺛﺎﻝ( ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪ ،31 :‬ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪2 :‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﺟﻭﺓ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻘﻑ ﻭﺷﺑﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻳﺑﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‬
‫)‪ (2‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ(‪ :‬ﺃﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ )ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ(‪ :‬ﺃﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ )ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ(‪ :‬ﺃﺣﻣﺭ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ‪ 12‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ 9‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ 11‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ 10‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬
‫‪OPERATION‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ( )ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ(‬
‫ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬
‫‪) TIMER‬ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ(‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ(‬
‫ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬
‫‪FILTER‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ( )ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ(‬
‫ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .8‬ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻳﺑﺔ‬
‫‪ .1.8‬ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ‬
‫)‪ (1‬ﺣﺭﻙ ﺧﻁﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪2‬‬
‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫)‪ (3‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‬
‫ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺭﻏﻲ‬
‫ﺧﻁﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‬
‫‪Ar-11‬‬
‫‪2017/12/21 17:03:21‬‬
‫‪9371022611_IM_Ar.indd 11‬‬
‫‪ .3.8‬ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ‬
‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ )ﻟﻣﺑﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻛﺱ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻊ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ "ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ"‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﻭﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﺑـ ‪ 4‬ﻁﺭﻕ ﻟﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺗﻔﺿﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )ﺃﺧﺿﺭ(‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫)‪(4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ‬
‫)ﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ(‬
‫ﻛﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ‬
‫)‪(Wired RC‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ‬
‫)ﺃﺣﻣﺭ(‬
‫ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺭﻣﻭﺳﺗﺎﺕ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪(1‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪) ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻛﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﺗﻠﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﻣﺗﻧﺎﺳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺟﺳﻡ ﺗﻛﻳﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء‪.‬‬
‫)‪(4‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﺗﺭﻣﻭﺳﺗﺎﺕ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪(2‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﻓﺟﻭﺓ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﻭﺟﺳﻡ ﺗﻛﻳﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء‪.‬‬
‫)‪(5‬‬
‫)‪(1‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻭﺗﻭﺭ ﻣﺭﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ‪1‬‬
‫)‪(5‬‬
‫)‪(2‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ )ﺻﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺳﻌﺔ(‬
‫‪ .9‬ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫‪ .1.9‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ )ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ(‬
‫• ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(5‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺭﻳﻑ ﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫)‪(3‬‬
‫‪ .2.9‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫• ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻣﻛﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء‪ ،‬ﺗﻭﻣﺽ ﻣﺻﺎﺑﻳﺢ ﻣﺅﺷﺭﺍﺕ ‪) OPERATION‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ( ﻭ‪) TIMER‬ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ( ﺑﺑﻁء‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .10‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺣﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺗﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﻭﺹ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ )ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ( ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺣﺹ‬
‫ﻫﻝ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ؟‬
‫ﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺿﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺳﻘﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻫﻝ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﻓﺣﺹ ﻟﺗﺳﺭﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ )ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ(؟‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺩﻓﺋﺔ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫)‪(9‬‬
‫)‪(15‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪(13‬‬
‫)‪(1‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ‪RB‬‬
‫‪ 0.5 :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ 0.5 /‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫‪ 0.1 :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ 0.1 /‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫) ( ‪ :‬ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‬
‫*‪) UTY-RNKYT / UTY-RNK‬ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ(‬
‫ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ‬
‫ﻫﻝ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ؟‬
‫ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻫﻝ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﺭﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ؟‬
‫ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻫﻝ ﺟﻬﺩ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻫﻭ ﻧﻔﺳﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﺻﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ؟‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻓﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻑ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺣﺗﺭﺍﻕ‬
‫ﻫﻝ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺟﻣﻳﻌًﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ؟‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻓﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻑ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺣﺗﺭﺍﻕ‬
‫ﻫﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺭﺽ )ﻣﺅﺭﺿﺔ(؟‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﻗﺻﺭ‬
‫ﻫﻝ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﻣﺎﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ؟‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻓﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻑ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺣﺗﺭﺍﻕ‬
‫ﻫﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻭﺍﺋﻕ؟‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺩﻓﺋﺔ‬
‫ﻫﻝ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺑﺩء ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻛﻳﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ؟‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫*‪) UTY-RNR*Z‬ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺛﻧﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‪) [Next Page‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ( )ﺃﻭ ]‪[previous page‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ( ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻘﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﻫﻝ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻣﻳﻝ؟‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‪) [Error Information‬ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .11‬ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺳﻠﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻭﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ )ﻟﻣﺑﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )ﺃﺧﺿﺭ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ‬
‫)ﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ‬
‫)ﺃﺣﻣﺭ(‬
‫ﻛﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ‬
‫)‪(Wired RC‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‪) [Status‬ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﻭﺍﻓﺭ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺭﻗﻣﻳﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺭﻣﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫*‪) UTY-RLR‬ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺛﻧﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ(‬
‫ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ‬
‫)‪(1‬‬
‫)‪(2‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫)‪(1‬‬
‫)‪(4‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‬
‫)‪(1‬‬
‫)‪(6‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪(2‬‬
‫)‪(6‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪(2‬‬
‫)‪(9‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺭﻗﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪(3‬‬
‫)‪(1‬‬
‫ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫)‪(3‬‬
‫)‪(2‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪(3‬‬
‫)‪(10‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ )ﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺃﻳﻘﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ‬
‫ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ar-12‬‬
‫‪2017/12/21 17:03:21‬‬
‫‪9371022611_IM_Ar.indd 12‬‬
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement